30,907 results

Seafood CRC: aquaculture innovation hub

Project number: 2008-902
Project Status:
Completed
Budget expenditure: $137,655.95
Principal Investigator: Geoff L. Allan
Organisation: Department of Primary Industries and Regional Development (NSW)
Project start/end date: 30 Jun 2009 - 29 Jun 2012
Contact:
FRDC

Need

Within the Seafood CRC, approximately half the industry participants have committed most of their contribution to the CRC for production-based research and the majority of research provider participants are involved with production research. In total, approximately $3.5 million p.a. has been committed to finfish production or genetic research. While many participants have already committed to projects to address their priorities, the level of collaboration within these projects is modest and, as the majority of projects will conclude within 2-3 years, industry and research participants have expressed a desire to increase collaboration and networking. There is therefore an opportunity to better exploit synergies between industry and research participants to improve delivery of planned outcomes. Within the aquaculture industry, including sectors and companies outside the Seafood CRC, there is a strong need to increase the overall level of technology. In many cases, organisations have difficulty accessing the latest successful technology, particularly in the hatchery sector. This needs to be addressed through better networking and information exchange.

Specific needs are:
• To develop new levels of collaboration and cooperation across aquaculture sectors, disciplines and CRC programs and projects
• To coordinate training and capacity building programs for industry and research participants (including within and outside the CRC)
• To improve efficiency of project initiation and delivery of research outcomes
• To plan and budget activities to achieve target industry outcomes
• To generate investment in strategic research focused CRC outcomes
• Create mechanisms and cooperative research systems which can outlive the CRC

Objectives

1. Increase communication and collaboration among industry and research participants
2. Identify priorities and help develop applied research, training and extension activities

Final report

ISBN: 978-0-9756045-6-4
Authors: Geoff L. Allan Wayne O’Connor D. Stewart Fielder Mark Booth and Helena Heasman
Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Final Report • 2012-06-30 • 821.49 KB
2008-902-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Aquaculture Innovation Hub was a new initiative from the Seafood CRC and the Fisheries Research and Development Corporation to coordinate aquaculture research under the Seafood CRC, facilitate improved communication and assist development of new collaborative projects.

The hub brought together industry participants and research providers and fostered a better understanding of the research challenges faced by industry and the capacity and potential for researchers to address these challenges. The hub arranged face-to-face meetings, established a website and put help people stay in touch through email, teleconferences, text messaging and other forms of communication.

In addition, the hub developed and managed two hatchery networks, one for shellfish and one for marine finfish. The aim of the networks was to help hatcheries access and adopt the latest technology and identify key research, training and education priorities. The networks helped coordinate specific sessions on hatchery technology at the Australasian Aquaculture conferences in 2010 and 2012. Vocational and academic training needs were identified and training workshops, technical exchanges and visits organised.

Seafood CRC: securing and enhancing the Sydney rock oyster breeding program

Project number: 2006-226
Project Status:
Completed
Budget expenditure: $444,862.81
Principal Investigator: Wayne O'Connor
Organisation: Department of Primary Industries and Regional Development (NSW)
Project start/end date: 30 Jul 2006 - 31 Jan 2010
Contact:
FRDC

Need

The SRO industry has the potential to exploit new export initiatives and increase production. Any resurgence in the industry will depend on SOCo’s ability to manage the development and supply of selectively bred oysters. FRDC has fostered this process by supporting breeding programs and hatchery research, whilst encouraging industry management of technology. The Benzie Report, Oyster Research Advisory Committee (ORAC) R&D Strategic Plan and the Action Plan developed at the FRDC-funded QX workshop in June 2005 have all indicated that effective management strategies for the SRO industry must be underpinned by; 1) the continued development of oyster husbandry techniques to secure QX resistant breeding lines, and, 2) the identification of genes associated with QX disease resistance that can be used for marker-assisted selection. These complementary research goals represent a critical step in “QX proofing” NSW estuaries against ongoing and catastrophic QX disease outbreaks. Continued research may also allow farming to be re-established in areas abandoned because of QX disease. Integration of genetic markers and single pair mating into the hatchery-based breeding program will increase the efficiency of selection, and decrease the number of generations required to establish true breeding resistant lines. Without marker assisted selection, the breeding program may not reach its full potential in time to prevent further losses.

A comprehensive presentation on the SRO industry will be given during the FRDC board’s visit to Port Stephens in July 2006.

Objectives

1. To establish pair mating protocols necessary for the development of selectively bred oyster lines
2. To confirm the association between PO and QX resistance using pair matings and test the performance of PO-selected family lines in QX-prone estuaries
3. To identify and characterise additional genetic markers of disease resistance
4. To assess the value of cryopreservation to secure family lines for later use
5. To assess the use of non-chemical means for the induction of triploidy in SRO
6. To make the family lines produced in this research available to SOCo for incorporation in future breeding plans

Final report

Authors: Wayne A. O’Connor David A. Raftos Michael C. Dove Alison Kan and Kyle Johnston
Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

Final Report • 2011-06-28 • 4.55 MB
2006-226-DLD.pdf

Summary

The Select Oyster Company breeding plan has been amended to include a comprehensive manual of protocols for pair mating Sydney rock oysters (4.1). The association between phenoloxidase (PO) and QX resistance has been confirmed and a sensitive test for PO genotypes has been developed so that the breeding program has a tool to genotype parents and large numbers of their progeny to assist breeding (4.2-4.8). Protocols for cryopreservation of gametes have been developed and documented as a potential strategy to reduce SOCo’s overall maintenance costs for the lines and increase genetic security (4.9). Non-chemical means of triploidy induction in SRO (temperature and pressure shock) were tested (4.10). While these techniques were not as effective as existing chemical induction techniques, they have formed the basis of ongoing research to see if efficacy can be increased. A total of 60 pair mated family lines, including 31 lines with differing PO phenotypes, have been produced and are undergoing performance assessment in the field. These families will be made available to SOCo for incorporation in the industry breeding program.

SCRC: PhD 5.03 The role of inbound Chinese tourists in promoting Australian seafood products in China (student Jasha Bowe)

Project number: 2009-761
Project Status:
Completed
Budget expenditure: $0.00
Principal Investigator: Larry Lockshin
Organisation: University of South Australia
Project start/end date: 30 Mar 2010 - 20 Feb 2013
Contact:
FRDC

Need

This PhD proposal focuses on CRC's Program 1 goals. The key focus is on increased demand for Australian seafood in China, but our research has implications for marketing to any country that has substantial tourism in Australia: i.e., US, UK, mainland Europe, southern Asia. The project aims to reduce the costs and increasing the efficiency of promotion to higher income consumers, which should result in increased profitability throughout the value chain. The long term outcome should be additional profit margins through improved market access.

Final report

ISBN: 978-1-925982-81-7
Author: Jasha Henry Bowe
Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Final Report • 2013-02-21 • 8.15 MB
2009-761-DLD-PhD.pdf

Summary

China is forecast to become Australia’s largest tourism source market by 2017. While China holds great potential for the export of Australian seafood products, it currently sits only sixth behind Japan, Hong Kong, Taipei, the United States and Singapore in export value.

Country‑of‑origin research has found a consumer’s perception of a country influences their behaviours towards its products. Tourism research reports that an individual's’ perception of a country determines how many of them will visit it. The combination of the increase in Chinese tourists to Australia and the relatively low market share and the awareness of Australian wine and seafood domestically in China means that country of origin perceptions for these products might be developing from a tourism‑image related perspective. These product categories are not well advertised in China and thus there would be few initial impressions, which provides a suitable platform to seek answers to the research objectives.

This thesis evaluates substantive theory on country‑of‑origin effects, develops understanding of the role of tourism in promoting the consumption of Australian made products, and demonstrates new outcomes that can be achieved by applying alternative methods to capturing these effects. It measures how Australia’s destination image affects Chinese consumers’ evaluation and choice of Australian wine and seafood.

Best practice guidelines for Australian fisheries management agencies

Project number: 2015-203
Project Status:
Completed
Budget expenditure: $410,115.00
Principal Investigator: Alistair Hobday
Organisation: CSIRO Oceans and Atmosphere Hobart
Project start/end date: 30 Jun 2015 - 23 Oct 2017
Contact:
FRDC

Need

There is a need for greater efficiency in government while reducing red and green tape, simplifying regulation and pursuing sustainable and profitable fisheries. In doing so, fisheries management also aims to gain and maintain the trust and confidence of fishery stakeholders and the general public by ensuring management is a transparent and participatory process. The current operating environment for fisheries and fishing businesses involves a range of practices and policies applied by a range of regulators with lack of consistency at whole of government level and among jurisdictions considerable duplication in process. There would be considerable benefits to reducing this complexity by adopting nationally agreed standards for fisheries management. While this is clearly a task for government, a strategic research project could assist by reviewing existing international standards and domestic arrangements, and by laying the groundwork for a national debate about consistent and agreed fisheries management standards that would reduce costs for industry, simplify the task for fishery regulators, while simultaneously meeting public expectations for transparent processes and good fisheries management.

Objectives

1. Review existing and emerging standards for fisheries management
2. Benchmark current management practices – regulatory processes, policies, guidelines and standards – across all Australian fishery management jurisdictions
3. Identify options for a national set of auditable standards for fisheries management in Australia

Final report

ISBN: 978-1-4863-1277-1
Authors: Alistair Hobday Rich Little Cathy Bulman Caleb Gardner Belinda McGrath-Steer Emily Ogier Nick Rayns Sevaly Sen Sean Sloan Tony Smith Linda Thomas
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 7.06 MB
2015-203-DLD Fisheries Agency Guidelines.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community. The main output of this project is a set of guidelines provided in a Guidance Document, which are provided as a stand-alone component of this final report (Box 1). This final report provides only a high level overview of the project for reporting purposes, and we suggest most readers will get all they need from the Guidance Document.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 2.79 MB
2015-203-DLD Appendix 1 Fisheries Standards Updates.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
 
At the first project meeting held in November, the team scoped the landscape of related projects to identify synergy; worked to understand and develop definitions of standards, benchmarks and guidelines; reviewed market place trends and discussed the implications of all of these on Australian fisheries. The meeting brought out differing views on project scope and on what type of standard would be developed. One of the main discussion points was the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There was broad agreement that there are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries (less so for smallscale, low-value, data-deficient fisheries), but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 7.06 MB
2015-203-DLD Fisheries Agency Guidelines.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community. The main output of this project is a set of guidelines provided in a Guidance Document, which are provided as a stand-alone component of this final report (Box 1). This final report provides only a high level overview of the project for reporting purposes, and we suggest most readers will get all they need from the Guidance Document.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 2.79 MB
2015-203-DLD Appendix 1 Fisheries Standards Updates.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
 
At the first project meeting held in November, the team scoped the landscape of related projects to identify synergy; worked to understand and develop definitions of standards, benchmarks and guidelines; reviewed market place trends and discussed the implications of all of these on Australian fisheries. The meeting brought out differing views on project scope and on what type of standard would be developed. One of the main discussion points was the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There was broad agreement that there are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries (less so for smallscale, low-value, data-deficient fisheries), but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 7.06 MB
2015-203-DLD Fisheries Agency Guidelines.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community. The main output of this project is a set of guidelines provided in a Guidance Document, which are provided as a stand-alone component of this final report (Box 1). This final report provides only a high level overview of the project for reporting purposes, and we suggest most readers will get all they need from the Guidance Document.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 2.79 MB
2015-203-DLD Appendix 1 Fisheries Standards Updates.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
 
At the first project meeting held in November, the team scoped the landscape of related projects to identify synergy; worked to understand and develop definitions of standards, benchmarks and guidelines; reviewed market place trends and discussed the implications of all of these on Australian fisheries. The meeting brought out differing views on project scope and on what type of standard would be developed. One of the main discussion points was the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There was broad agreement that there are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries (less so for smallscale, low-value, data-deficient fisheries), but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed.
Final Report • 2019-05-30 • 4.04 MB
2015-203-DLD Guidance Document.pdf

Summary

The project was developed in consultation with the Australian Fisheries Management Authority and State/Territory fisheries agencies. The idea of a publicly available set of standards or guidelines for marine fishery management agencies has been under discussion within fisheries agencies for some time and is consistent with broader directions in government policy and expectations of stakeholders and the broader community.
As a step towards creating a national standard for fisheries management, this project has focused on creating a best practice method, through the development of National Fisheries Management Guidelines. The Guidelines provide a framework regarding the approaches and information that will help them achieve best practice and ultimately lead to the development of a standard if sought in the future. We note the difference between a product standard, and a process standard. There are many fishery product standards, applicable to a range of fisheries and the seafood they harvest, but there are fewer process standards relating to how fisheries are managed. As a step towards creating standards for fisheries management, a best practice is a method or technique that has been generally accepted as superior to any alternatives because it produces results that are better than those achieved by other means. In this sense, the Guidelines provide information to fishery management agencies and their stakeholders regarding the approaches that will help agencies pursue their objectives.
In summary, this document:
1. Outlines the need for Guidelines and their context
2. Describes how the functions were identified and tested
3. Describes the functions
4. Shows application to agencies
5. Provides guidance on how to implement these Guidelines
6. Shows application to fisheries via a set of case studies
These Guidelines should be reviewed and updated on a five year basis, as best practice will certainly evolve over that period of time.

Seafood CRC: development of formulated diets for cultured abalone

Project number: 2010-736
Project Status:
Completed
Budget expenditure: $218,931.71
Principal Investigator: David A. Stone
Organisation: SARDI Food Safety and Innovation
Project start/end date: 14 Nov 2010 - 30 Dec 2013
Contact:
FRDC

Need

It is estimated that 1000 tonnes of formulated feeds are used to achieve the current level of production. Feed is considered as the major variable cost (up to 30%) associated with abalone production (Mr Justin Fromm, personal communication), so minor improvements in feeds or feed efficiency may result in large improvements in productivity. There are currently four feed manufacturers supplying the abalone grow-out sector and each feed company typically offers one formulation of feed for the entire ~2.5 year production cycle of greenlip or hybrid abalone. It is common practice in other sectors of the livestock industry to use a range of different diet formulations throughout the production cycle to satisfy the requirements of animals of different life stages. It is also well established that in the wild abalone have at least two distinct feeding strategies as they develop with young cryptic abalone grazing on epiphytic organisms whilst older animals feed on macroalgae. Improvements in commercial feeds formulated for abalone, specifically for different life stages and/or water temperatures (seasonal/inter-annual/climate change), are likely to deliver improvement in weight gain per unit cost across an entire grow out period.

As a result of a recent R & D planning meeting held by AAGA, other industry participants, AS CRC and research providers, the AAGA perceive that the current commercial abalone feeds do not contain the required nutrient combinations to meet the genetic potential for growth. Australian abalone feed producers have based dietary formulations on information from previous FRDC funded projects. The information from the FRDC projects, including a range of ingredient nutrient availability and nutrient requirement data, resulted in the standard of Australian abalone feeds surpassing Japanese abalone feeds (considered as the benchmark at the time). AAGA have identified research in this area to be their highest priority within the AS CRC.

Objectives

1. To detemine optimum protein and energy requirements for small greenlip and hybrid abalone at different temperatures
2. To detemine optimum protein and energy requirements for larger greenlip and hybrid abalone at different temperatures
3. To develop and test starter feeds and improved grow-out feeds for greenlip and hybrid abalone in commercial settings
4. To develop an on-farm grow-out trial research protocol manual.

Final report

ISBN: 978-1-921563-68-3
Authors: David A.J. Stone Matthew S. Bansemer and James O. Harris
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
Final Report • 2015-02-09 • 1.87 MB
2010-736-DLD.pdf

Summary

The key research findings described in this project addressed the two highest research priorities identified by the Australian Abalone Grower' Association (AAGA) in 2009, prior to the commencement of this project.:

  1. Improve our understanding of the effects of seasonal water temperatures on the growth of abalone; and
  2. Improve our understanding of the effects of dietary protein on the growth of abalone

Members of the AAGA were interested in determining if multi-diet feeding strategies designed specifically to provide the optimum dietary protein level to the abalone in response to animal age and seasonal fluctuations in water temperature improve production. Additionally, the planned overall outcome from tis project was to develop commercial diet formulation and feeding strategies that deliver a >10% improvement  in productivity across an entire grow-out period for greenlip (Haliotis laevigata) and hybrid abalone (H. laevigata x H. rubra). To achieve this outcome, a series of laboratory-based experiments were designed to improve our understanding of the optimum dietary protein levels for greenlip abalone and also characterise the growth and feed utilisation of greelip abalone of different age classes at a range of seasonal temperatures (14-22oC) representative of those experienced by abalone in land-based facilities in southern Australia (Chapters 2 and 3). This information was then used to design and run three commercial on-farms trials at the Great Southern Waters, Costal Seafarms and Kangaroo Island Abalone (Chapters 4 and 5). The on-farm trials comprised a series of three long-term (>18 months) studies, using commercial culture practices, to evaluate the growth, feed utilisation and survival of greenlip and hybrid abalone using two different feeding strategies:

  1. Single-diet feeding strategy: the current production method of feeding one standard protein for the entire trial
  2. Multi-diet feeding strategy: fed a sequential combination of "high protein"/"low protein" grow-out diets for the entire trial.
View Filter

Organisation